Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks. you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. 1 .Introduction In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally.

2 .

you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. 3 . and plumbing fixtures. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. such as mechanical equipment. fixtures.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Germany. and plumbing engineering workflows. such as duct. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. electrical panels. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Add more detailed modelling elements. electrical. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. and piping. Add basic MEP elements. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich.

views. to provide a richer and more finished design. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. Contact your CAD manager for more information. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. For example. On the Contents tab. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. and sheets to document the project. templates. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. your Training folder may be in a different location. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. When you open a training file. NOTE Depending on your installation. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. and tags. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. annotations. Metric file names have an _m suffix. is located and accessed in the training files location. After completing each exercise. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. Create detail views. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. You do not design entire systems. however. such as templates and families. In this exercise. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. So. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. you learn where the training files are located. when you add ductwork. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. However. When you install the training files as instructed. For example.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. Create schedules. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Metric: files for users working with metric units. as well as how to open and save them. you can choose to save your work. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises.

a list of file types displays. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. and click Save. and you can open any supported file type. For example. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise.rvt) is selected. 4 Click the training file name. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type.rvt.rvt and make changes. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. For File name. For Files of type. the Open dialog displays. verify that Project Files (*. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. you are prompted to save the changes.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. double-click Imperial or Metric. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click the Training Files icon. click ➤ Save As. and click Open. Accessing Training Files | 5 . Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. You may close the file with or without saving changes. enter the new file name. scroll down. 8 If you have made changes. select the folder in which to save the new file. if you open settings. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. 3 In the right pane.

6 .

and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. the parameter is one of association or connection. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. and phases when you need it. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. ■ ■ 7 . scope. every drawing sheet. drawings.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. the floor or roof remains connected. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. the door retains this relationship to the partition. the operation of the software is parametric. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. If the length of the elevation is changed. the hierarchy of elements. You learn the terminology. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. In mathematics and mechanical CAD. If you move the partition. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. In this case. schedules. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. In the Revit MEP model. and plans. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. quantities. sections. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. and schedules required for a building project. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. As you work in drawing and schedule views. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. 2D and 3D view. hence. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. In this case. drawing sheets.

Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. dimensions. and electrical panels. boilers. For example. They display in relevant views of the design. For example. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. and reference planes are datum elements. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. tags. and 2D detail components. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. dimensions. sinks. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . levels. They help to describe or document the design. ducts. and electrical panels. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. Datum elements help to define project context. walls and ceilings are hosts. ducts. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. filled regions. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. For example. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. When you change something. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. Examples include detail lines. grids. For example. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. tags. sprinklers. For example. sinks. boilers. sprinklers. and keynotes are annotation elements.

and types. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. elevation views. Often. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. from geometry to construction data. programming is not required. you do nothing to establish these relationships. The project file contains all information for the building design. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. and so forth). In other cases. floors. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. such as roofs. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. To place levels. For example. you must be in a section or elevation view. Project: In Revit MEP. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. views of the project. section views. Understanding the Concepts | 9 .Elevation View Element: When creating a project. If you can draw. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. schedules. Most often. you can explicitly control them. families. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. By using a single project file. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. North . or bottom of foundation. and drawings of the design. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. However. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. for example. industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. This information includes components used to design the model. In Revit MEP. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. and ceilings. top of wall. first floor.This implementation provides flexibility for designers.

■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Type: Each family can have several types. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. For example. A type can be a specific size of a family. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. For example. System families can be transferred between projects. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . each in-place family contains only a single type. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. A type can also be a style. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. or layer the views to see only the one on top. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. hiding. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. However. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. such as a 30” X 42” title block. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. With a few clicks. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. showing. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. and similar graphical representation. For example. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. and wires. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Unlike system and standard component families. System families include ducts. You can also display several project views at one time. identical use. You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Then experiment with them. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface. pipes. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same.

The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 . Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. To return the panel to the ribbon. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab.

tools used for editing existing elements.Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. and for switching views. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. project and system parameters. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. tools used for running analysis on the current design. and CAD files. select the tool first... many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. then select what you want to modify. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. architect-specific tools. When working on the Modify tab. and settings. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. data and systems.

Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. By default. provides requested information. closes the application menu (double-click). application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 .Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. For example. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. when adding duct. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. To keep a panel expanded. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. displays frequently used tools. provides access to common tools. a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command.

.. click. Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. such as Export and Publish. (Open) save the current drawing. select a template and create a new drawing. (Save As) export the current drawing. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. (Export) On the application menu.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. select a file to open. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . (Save) save the current drawing with a new name.

customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Print) access product and license information. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project. annotation. to. saves a current project.. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. family. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. family. Camera. and Walkthrough. provides views including Default 3D. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.On the application menu. To enable or disable a tool item. (Licensing) close the file. but is not enabled by default. publish the current project. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server.. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 . annotation. or template file... or template file. (Publish) print the current drawing. click. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session.

While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). workshared components. However. Starting with the most recent command. repeat the command. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. check the Status Bar. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. when you switch to another editing mode. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Modify. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. or the Family Editor. Clear the Status Bar check mark. To hide the Status Bar.To undo or redo a series of operations. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame. Clipboard. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. When you are using a command. click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. To show the Status Bar again. In addition. When you are highlighting an element or component. This displays the command history in a list. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. displaying the same information. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. Group. 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . a tool tip appears next to the cursor. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do.

including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. Place a Wall. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. select one or more elements of the same category. On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Modify). Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type.To cancel or exit the current command. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. for example. When you place an element in a drawing. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. To change existing elements to a different type.

you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. Zoom the view In the tutorials. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. There are several ways to access zoom options. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. After you are familiar with these tasks. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project. For example. In the following steps. 1 Click ➤ Open.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click Training Files.

NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. Modifying the View | 19 . and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. To modify or add snap increments. If you do not have a wheel mouse. click . Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. on the Navigation bar. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. In the drawing area. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 6 Click in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 5 Click Zoom To Fit. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. use a zoom menu command to zoom out. When you release the mouse button. 9 To display SteeringWheels. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. the view zooms in on the selected area. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design.

the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. As you move the mouse. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. and click tin the Options dialog. Click and drag to orbit the design. press ESC. To define settings for SteeringWheels. click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design. and then using the Zoom tool again. click the SteeringWheels tab. For more information about SteeringWheels. moving the wheel to the desired location. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. ➤ Options. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. bottoms. Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. and select the duct. 2 Enter ZR. After you are familiar with these tasks. These are the drag controls. and open Level 2 . and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Similar controls.Design ➤ Floor Plans.HVAC Plan . Small blue dots. display along the ends. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. as shown.Design. called drag controls. referred to as shape handles.

All changes you make to a project are tracked. 6 On the Undo menu. select the first item in the list. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. In this example.3 Click and drag the bottom control. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . on the Standard toolbar. 4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. or press CTRL+Z. click the Undo command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Move. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions.

10 Move the cursor to the right. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . Some commands. such as Move and Copy. as shown. The duct is moved to the new position. click to specify the starting position.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 11 With the duct already selected. require 2 clicks to complete the command. you want to move the duct. for example. and drag it to the left as shown. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. After selecting the element to move. and click again to specify the ending position. In this case.

you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. such as the Modify Ducts command. For example. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar.End a command Some commands. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 14 Enter VG. Press ESC twice. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Supply. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .Return. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways. Click OK. 13 To end a command. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. Select Mechanical .

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

click Browse. In that case. and click Open. system families. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. under Create new. New projects inherit all the families. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. such as coordination review and interference checking. 2 In the New Project dialog. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. settings. Finally. link files. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. and geometry from the starting template. use copy/monitor. click Training files.rte template. 5 In the New Project dialog. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. such as the default project units and settings. create and manage views. under Template file. you learn how to start a project from a template. 6 Click OK. You can choose from several templates. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 27 . and loadable families. select Project. and modify system settings. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. and open Imperial ➤ Templates. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. such as ducts and pipes. You can either select a template from the template library. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. the default building levels and standard views. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise.

Click OK. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. (Browse). expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). For example. 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. 8 In the drawing area. Click OK twice. click (Browse). click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. If you want to use a template other than the default. zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. create another new project using the Construction template. ■ For Building Construction. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. navigate to Imperial Templates. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. ■ ■ Under Create new. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. For Location. for Energy Data. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type.rte template and click Open. When you select the material. select Manchester. review the construction materials listed. select Project template.7 In the Project Browser. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. NH. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select School or University. 10 Using the same method. In the Choose Template dialog. and open North. Click Cancel. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . click Browse. under Energy Analysis. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can select it now. select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab. click Edit. for City. select Level 1.

rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. wiring. 25 In the left pane. for 3 1/2". Click OK twice. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. click Wiring. 11 1/2". select Identity Data. 5 1/2". piping. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. click Sizes. select Views. After standard settings have been established for an organization. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. and 12 1/2". 4 1/2". under Duct Settings. Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. click Round. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns.rfa and click Open. for 3/4". 33 Click OK. 24 In the right pane. 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 27 Click OK. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. power distribution systems. 26 In the right pane. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. Holding CTRL. 10 1/2". 4 1/2". plumbing. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Duct Settings. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . 23 In the left pane. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. under Pipe Settings. For Categories. and 5 1/2". for 3 1/2". and fire protection systems. 22 In the right pane. and demand factors for electrical systems. click Rectangular.

5 Click OK. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Sort by. select Auto . An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. select Sub-Discipline. 4 In the New Project dialog. From the Positioning list. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. Linking Projects In this exercise. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. In addition. 38 Close the file. select Project. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. For Then by. To enable this coordination. under Create new. Notice that the file is saved as a template.Origin to Origin. You need to create the MEP model for the project. Click Open. 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. click Browse. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . For Then by. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. select View Name. and groups that are contained in a project. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. sheets. 2 In the New Project dialog. select Family and Type. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. click Training. under Template file. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. select Associated Level.rvt. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. families.

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and click OK twice.11 In the Places dialog. ➤ Open. click My Library. and Import dialogs. click (Add Value). or families. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. 15 Under Library Name. and click (Browse). 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. click the My Library icon. Save. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. templates. Load. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. and change the name to My Library. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and select it as the library path. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. and click Open.

custom color files. 9 In the text editor. 19 Click Cancel. view the current path. 20 Click ➤ Options. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 14 Click in the drawing area. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. 11 In the Options dialog. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 27 Click OK. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. click OK. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. (Remove Value) to delete the library. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 22 Select My Library. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. click Edit. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. click Edit. specify the new location here. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. and decal image files. If you work in a large office. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 21 On the File Locations tab. If you want to relocate this path. 3 Under Settings. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 12 Create a new project using the default template. such as bump maps. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. click the Spelling tab. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . This path is determined during installation. 2 In the Options dialog. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 5 In the text editor. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. select Ignore words in uppercase. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click Places. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit.

18 Click ➤ Options. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. 25 Close the file without saving it. click Close. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 19 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . click the Spelling tab. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. you modify snap settings. In this exercise. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and enter 1 . click Restore Defaults. click Browse. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. you modify snap increments. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. click File menu ➤ Save. click OK. Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. 24 In the Options dialog. delete sheetmtl-CU. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. As you zoom in and out within a view. click Training Files. 23 In the text editor. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. under Template file. under Dimension Snaps.rte. click OK. 6 In the Snaps dialog. work with snapping turned off. 21 Under Personal dictionary.. click Edit. 20 Under Settings. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 22 In the text editor. 2 In the New Project dialog.17 In the Spelling dialog. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. You can turn snap settings on and off.

you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. TIP To zoom while sketching. enter SM. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. deselect Chain. 8 In the Snaps dialog. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. If it does not. snapping reverts to the system default settings. such as ZO to zoom out. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. and move the cursor to the right. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 . you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. 10 On the Options Bar. If you do not have a wheel button.7 Under Object Snaps. While sketching. click OK. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. use the wheel button on your mouse. This is the increment that you added previously. For example. zoom out until it does so. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off.

17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and move the cursor to the right. 19 Enter SM. and the wall edges. Notice that snapping is once again active. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. Do not set the wall end point. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. If you move the cursor along the wall. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. click in the Length dimension snap increments box.. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 22 Move the cursor downward. and delete the value 1’ . the midpoint. 25 Click OK. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. and specify the wall endpoint. it will snap to the endpoints. 26 Close the file. with or without saving it. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall.

Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. 43 . You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

After finishing each exercise. you first plan the system. water source heat pump (WSHP). This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. As you create the mechanical system. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. methodology. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. In this lesson. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you first configure the linked architectural model. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. However. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises. After applying a color scheme to the zones. and then you create a plenum level. you will understand the process. you design a mechanical system for an office building. go to http://www. This system consists of a cooling tower. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. you can choose to save your work. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. In this exercise. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. 45 . By following the recommended workflow. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. duct system and a hydronic piping system. If the tutorial training files are not present. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. At the end of the tutorial.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.autodesk. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

ceilings. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. In this section. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. and after the linked model highlights. NOTE When working with a linked file. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. roof. you add a level for plenums. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. click to select it.rvt. click Training Files. Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . These components are defined in the architectural training file.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties.Space Plan is highlighted. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. not in the MEP training file. indicating that it’s the active view. and click OK. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. Next. under Constraints. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Room Bounding.

click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. 9 On the Draw panel. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). Preparing Spaces | 47 . and double-click West . 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. Click Plan View Types.6 In the Project Browser. and in the Plan View Types dialog. and enter Level 2 Plenum.MEP. verify that only Floor Plan is selected. enter 8'. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). 16 Press Esc.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). The new level is placed. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . For Offset. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. and click OK. Verify that Make Plan View is selected.

Notice that the site plan displays in the view. NOTE After finishing each exercise. For View Classification.Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. In this exercise. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected. and for Offset. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. right-click Level 2 Plenum. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. for Top.Plenum. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. select Level Above (Level 3). and then place spaces in various types of areas. click Edit. In this exercise. enter 0. for Level. For Sub-Discipline. you can choose to save your work. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . enter an Offset of 1' 0". In the next exercise. you place spaces in areas of the building model. select Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. for View Range. and click Apply Default View Template. for View Scale. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. However. Under View Depth. select MEP . 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . right-click Level 2 Plenum. ■ Click OK twice. 20 In the Project Browser. select Plenum Plan.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser. for Default View Template. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. For Cut plane. Under Identity Data. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. Under Extents.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. For Space. For Upper Limit. Placing Spaces | 49 . Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. select Horizontal. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. select Level 2 Plenum. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. indicating that it’s the active view. You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor. select New.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. walls. For (Tag Location). click Training Files. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 0. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser. This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. and ceilings). 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. For Offset.

■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. For Name. enter Library. 14 In the drawing area. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26).7 Click to place the space. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. Click OK. enter 219. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP . 9 Select the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. for Number. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. ensuring coordination between the files.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum.

18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. 20 Click in the Library to place the space.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. select Level 3. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. and then click Modify. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. enter 0. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Placing Spaces | 51 . For Upper Limit. 21 Using the method learned previously. For Offset.

25 Close the file with or without saving it. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. under Energy Analysis. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 23 Click OK.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. you place a space in a large corridor area. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and then split the space using a space separation line.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 5 On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. select Level 3.Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and then press Esc. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. and for Offset. enter 0. for Upper Limit.

54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule. 10 Using the same method. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. double-click the space name. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view. the plan view would have updated with the changes. and scroll to the newly placed space. 9 In the floor plan. change the space number to 216A. as shown. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and press Enter.7 In the Project Browser. which was numbered 219Q. enter Corridor. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 11 Close the schedule view. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. In the schedule.

18 Close the file with or without saving it. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . place a space in the lower area of the split space.15 Press Esc twice. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). 16 Using the method learned previously. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. you place a space in a chase. click Training Files. Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point. indicating that it’s the active view. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt.Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . If necessary. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.Space Plan is highlighted. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

4 Press Esc. 10 In the plan view. 12 Click in the section view. for Name. and click Element Properties. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. select Level 3. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. enter 4'. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. enter 0. Under Identity Data. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. select the space. for Upper Limit. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. and then click OK. enter 225PC. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 6 Enter VG. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. In the plan view. enter Chase. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. select Interior and Reference. for Upper Limit. right-click. expand Spaces. For Number. For Limit Offset. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Roof Level. For Offset. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . On the Options Bar. click in the chase area to place the space.

58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. 15 Press Esc. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. under Loaded Tags.Space Plan. and maximize the view. and click OK. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. floors.Bounding elements (such as walls. In the next exercises. 17 Type ZF. select Space Tag With Volume. ceilings. All spaces in the view are tagged. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .

After a space is placed in an area. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. To display space reference lines. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned.rvt. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . which removes the space from the Default zone. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Reference. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan.Zoning is highlighted. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Spaces. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Notice that Default is currently the only zone. click View ➤ Zones. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. In this exercise. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ).

verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information.5 In the System Browser. select Computer Lab 222. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. and verify the zones in the System Browser. under Energy Analysis. 4 In the drawing area. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. you can add or remove a space from the zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. under Spaces. As you do this. indicating that the space is occupiable. indicating that it’s the active view. The Zone tool is active. Instruction 221. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.Zoning is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you assign spaces to a zone. click Reference. and a new zone is created. and click Finish Editing Zone. Using the Edit Zone tab.rvt. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. and modify the zone properties. click Training Files. select Occupiable. and Electrical 220 spaces. To display space reference lines. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. Next. the Edit Zone tab displays. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click 121 Cafeteria. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assign spaces to zones in the building. The graphic in the System Browser updates.

and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. select HVAC Zones. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. Expand HVAC Zones. type VG. you need to activate the zone visibility. and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill).In the System Browser. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. To view the zone in the drawing area. Instruction. 5 With the drawing area active. Click OK. ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line.

under Identity Data. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. click Finish Editing Zone.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. You activated zone visibility in the views. click Training Files. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. under Spaces. To display space reference lines. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows.Zoning is highlighted. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). and verify the zone in the System Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. expand 2 . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone.rvt.Zoning. 9 In the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.West . 10 On the Edit Zone tab. click Reference. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .Area B. you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. indicating that it’s the active view. for Name.West . 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Close the System Browser. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click OK. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.TIP After you finish editing the zone. enter 2 .

Select Attached End. 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone.Zoning floor plan. 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone.Zoning view.Zoning view to activate it. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.Zoning view. 15 Press Esc.5 Click in the Level 1 . 8 In the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. 9 With the Add Space tool active. zoom out. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired. Verify that the distance is 1/2". Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .

In this exercise. click Training Files. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 .Zoning view. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise. for Name Value. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. and zone information. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog. and click OK. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. Front. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. click the corner where the Top.Zoning to make it the active view. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. you verify the building. double-click Level 1 .The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. on the ViewCube. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. double-click the zone tag. space. The new zone name displays in the System Browser.rvt. enter Lounge .East.

Next. Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. Using the Highlight tool. and select 109 Lounge. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. you isolate the space. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. Click (Highlight). The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. With 109 Lounge selected. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden. verify that Wireframe is selected. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). click (Isolate).

6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. For People. and click OK. Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. click . click . and in the Space Type Settings dialog. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. select Lounge/Recreation. Below the list of spaces and zones. scroll down in the left pane. verify that <Building> is selected. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). and in the People dialog. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. For Construction Type. and then click OK. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. and then click OK. Next. click . All spaces in the zone display in isolation. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. the space information displays for the selected space. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For Electrical Loads.■ On the Details tab. ■ ■ ■ Next. select 1_South_Lounge. select 109 Lounge. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type.

00 °F : N/A is specified. floors. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type. and other room-bounding components. This indicates the heating set point. the zone information displays for the selected zone. verify that 74. and dehumidification set point. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 .Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown. and humidification set point. View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. verify that <Building> is selected. This indicates the cooling set point. Next. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. Below the list of spaces and zones. For Cooling Information. heating air temperature. This indicates the outdoor air per person.00 °F : 90. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. roofs. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. verify that 70. and air changes per hour. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. click (Shading).00 °F : 54. cooling air temperature. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified.00 °F : N/A is specified. 12 Using the methods learned previously. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. outdoor air per area. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. For Heating Information.

Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. open MEP . 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum). 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. enter 0. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned.Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Click OK. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. Because this is an unoccupied space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Plenum. Under Energy Analysis. for Number. select Plenum. click Cancel. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Offset.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. For Name. Under Energy Analysis. 15 In the Project Browser. enter 212P. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. select Level 3.

under Energy Analysis. space. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. and zone information. for City. For Location. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Postal Code. is selected. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building.Space Plan. you verified building.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. click Edit. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click in the Value field. In this exercise. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. enter 03101. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. verify that Manchester. double-click Level 2 . and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. for Energy Data. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. NH. and select space Plenum 212P. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. and verify that the space has replaced the void. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. On the Place tab. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. select School or University. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files.

For People. for Values. for Building Service. For Space Type. first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. 8 In the drawing area. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. If. and enter 50 sq. verify that Occupiable is selected. select Heated and cooled. and click OK. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. under Volume Computations. select Specified. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that New Construction is selected. select Specified. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. In order to select a space. Click OK twice. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Level 1 is selected. both. right-click. For Sensible. Select Area per person. select space Library 219. verify that 1' 0" is specified. click Edit. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. For Export Complexity. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. a cooling load. ft. ■ On the Weather tab. select Library . for Values. For Latent. or neither. and then click . enter 150 Btu/h. and click Element Properties. For Condition Type. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. For Building Construction. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Project Phase.Audio Visual. For Sliver Space Tolerance. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click OK. you need to select this option. Under Heat Gain (per Person). verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. enter 200 Btu/h. click in the Value column. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). and click OK. For Ground Plane.

select 219 Library. click Information). click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. You should correct the space error in the building model. verify that <Building> is specified. Click OK twice. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. There should be no warnings displayed. If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. You have verified the building information. click Calculate. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. and under Heating Information. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . it should be corrected before you calculate loads. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). for Values. Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. select Actual. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. click Edit.■ ■ ■ Click OK. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Next. verify that Manchester. Under Power. verify that School or University is selected. is specified. and click OK. 12 Click the Details tab. and can be modified here. NH. Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. Select the space associated with the warning. for Values. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. and click to learn the cause for the warning. select Actual. For Electrical Loads. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . For Building Construction. For Location. For Building Service. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays.

under Energy Analysis. and zone information for the building model. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. select HVAC Zones. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. select 219 Library. click Training Files. and a loads report displays. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. 21 Click OK.rvt. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Notice that the space information was automatically updated. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. 16 After you review the loads report. click to the right of the building to place the legend. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. or make any changes to the model. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 3 In the drawing area. Click OK. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 19 In the drawing area. space.Space Plan. 15 Review the loads report for project. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. 17 In the loads report. For Color Scheme. weather.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. In this exercise. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . space. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise. or zone information.

Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 . select the color scheme legend. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. in 1-ton increments.5 Zoom in to the legend. under Schemes. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. and click OK. select Tonnage Range. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. The new scheme displays in the view.

74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Using the method learned previously.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area.

click Training Files. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building. In the next exercise. Select Schedule building components. Click OK. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Spaces. for Select available fields from. enter Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Fill is the active view. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system. more category options are available. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. In this exercise. For Name. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. select Spaces. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.12 Close the file with or without saving it. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. select New Construction. For Phase. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i.rvt.

select Level. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. select Level. and click OK.■ Under Available fields.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. and then click Conditional Format. and then click . 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . For Fields. and Blank line. For Then by. Header. and then select Hidden field. For Formula. For Type. enter . for Formula. Select Ascending. select HVAC. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Not Between. enter Airflow Delta. select Air Flow. In the Fields dialog. the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. ■ Click Calculated Value. In the Calculated Value dialog. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. click (Browse). ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. select Airflow Delta. select Calculated Supply Airflow. In the Schedule Properties dialog. select Number. Select Formula. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Discipline. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously.

you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and click OK. Under Conditions to Use. In the Color dialog. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. For Background Color. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy. Click OK twice. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. select red. verify that Show is highlighted. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. ■ The schedule displays. In this exercise. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. click the color swatch. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. a view opens that contains the selected space. right-click to access schedule properties. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. In later exercises.■ ■ ■ For Value. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. In the next lesson.

78 .

IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added. After completing the air systems lesson. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. Then. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you modify air terminal parameters. you will create supply air systems. and work with the airflow schedule. In this lesson. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. As you place the air terminals. you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After system creation. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). 79 .

zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i. indicating that it’s the active view. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. and scroll to space 223. the space crossing lines display.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 In the ceiling view.HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . When you highlight a space using the cursor.

and then press Esc to end the command. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . select the diffuser. verify that Constrain is cleared. 17 Move the cursor down. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . If the host element is modified or moved. the hosted elements are updated as well. 13 On the Options Bar.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel. 15 On the Options Bar.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. as shown. Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 9 On the Placement panel. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. and press Enter. The schedule updates with the new flow data. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. type 12. Also. and then select both Copy and Multiple. click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point. which in this case is the ceiling grid. and select Supply Diffuser . 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown. Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement.Rectangular Face Round Neck . for Flow. enter 425 CFM. click Place on Face. and press Enter.

and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 21 On the Options Bar. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. select one of the diffusers. 28 On the Placement tab. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. 27 Select Return Diffuser . and then press Esc. 24 In the Open dialog. as shown.rfa. Next. 22 In the drawing area. clear Leader. click Yes. click Place on Face. As you place the return diffusers.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. 25 In the drawing area. and click Open. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 29 Place 2 diffusers.

Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 32 In the Project Browser. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 31 In the alert dialog. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. as shown. click Yes. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. under Other. select one of the return diffusers. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 . You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. and click to select the lines. for Reference. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. select Strong Reference. and click OK. Level. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

41 In the Instance Properties dialog. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. for Constraints ➤ Offset. For the start point. 44 Zoom in to space 115. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . ■ ■ For the end point. and click OK. enter 9' 0"2750. Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. Verify that the measured distance is 9'. click the Level 1 line.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. and click View ➤ Systems.Press Esc. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. However. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones. In this exercise. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. When you highlight a space.rvt. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. the space crossing lines display. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . You then create the logical connection between the system components. right-click the title. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections.Design is highlighted. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 45 Close the file with or without saving it.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. including energy analysis. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. After creating the logical connection. verify that Design ➤ HVAC .

Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. As you add diffusers to systems.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. System Name. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. the number of elements is updated. 12 In the System Browser. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. Connect Into. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. 15 Click Cancel. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 6 Keep the System Browser open. On the Options Bar. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . review the Number of Elements. and Flow value. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 11 In the drawing area.

In this exercise. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. under Mechanical.17 Using the method learned previously. which updates the name in the System Browser. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 18 Click OK. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. 23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. 25 Click OK. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. under Identity Data. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. for System Name. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. and the system connects them. 26 Click Finish Editing System. for Mark. the air terminals are the children. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. 22 Click OK. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. In this exercise. Rename the system Next. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser.

Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. select Network. When you highlight a space using the cursor.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. which provides various layout tools. A Generate Layout tab displays. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. the Network type provides several solutions. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. indicating that it’s the active view. the space crossing lines display. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). and display solution 1. select the upper left diffuser. click Training Files. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 4 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan. Also. for Solution Type. In this case. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 .rvt. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. 5 On the Options Bar.

enter 3'. you’ll get an error in a later step. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Maximum Flex Duct Length.7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. For Duct Type. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. enter 9' 10 1/2". click Settings. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures. click Modify. Click OK. enter 9' 10 1/2". WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For Offset. Select Branch.Round. For Duct Type. 8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Offset. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . as shown. For Flex Duct Type.

as is the elbow itself.11 Click Finish Layout. For example. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. or manually modify the duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. or offset elevations are incorrect. Either relocate the system components. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. select a different layout solution.

You can delete ductwork and the system remains. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. select Duct Color Fill . Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. The first time you press Tab. and equipment. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . but not all values are used in this view. under Graphics. If the entire network does not highlight. Using a flow-based color scheme. and click OK. a disconnection exists. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection.NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. fittings. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. Usually. thus it is not part of the system. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend.Flow. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. highlight a segment of the main duct. for Values Displayed. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. and click to select it. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. select By View. for Color Scheme. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops.

Velocity. The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select the color scheme legend. and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. 25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. select one of the diffusers in the system. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. 20 In the drawing area. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated. select the WSHP. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. for Flow. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP. under Mechanical . Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity.Airflow. 26 Click OK. select Duct Color Fill . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and then press Esc to clear the selection. and on the Options Bar. and press Enter. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog.

If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. Select Restrict Height. Select Only.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. Click OK. Select the upper segment of main duct. The ductwork and fittings are updated. and drag it to the right. and then click to select it. click Cancel. Under Constraints. press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). and enter . and select 16".08 in-wg/100ft. 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. highlight a segment of the duct. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. for Branch Sizing. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. select Friction. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Calculated Size Only.

The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection). and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. Use the information that displays (flow. you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. 33 Move the cursor over the system components. and pressure loss. pressure. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . Using this tool. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. static pressure.

NOTE As you inspect a system. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise. remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. 35 Click Finish. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. click Training Files. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. also known as the critical path. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 36 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. and click Draw Duct. 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. and select the WSHP. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers.Design is highlighted.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and click to specify the end of the main duct. Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .HVAC Plan .

Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . select 9' 10 1/2". 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.3D MEP. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. 11 On the Options Bar. for Offset. NOTE When drawing duct. select the top right diffuser. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . right-click the connector grip. double-click MEP . 14 In the Project Browser. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown. and click Draw Duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. Front. 15 On the ViewCube. click the corner where the Top.

connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. the color fill indicates the flow value. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. it is considered a closed loop. Also. 22 Using the same method. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . 19 In the drawing area. and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The ductwork is automatically created. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into. 18 Make the floor plan the active view. in space 115.

24 Select the remaining diffusers. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog. and select the top left diffuser. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 Press Esc.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning.

Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . and then click Modify. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 30 Press Esc twice. 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. and click to select it.

and click OK. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. under Mechanical . 41 Close the file with or without saving it. such as a plenum. clear Restrict Height. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Flow. This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct.Airflow.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. and then click OK. select a segment of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. 40 Using the same method. under Constraints.

or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Automatically and manually lay out piping. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. including 2 base mounted pumps. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Create return and supply piping systems. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. 109 . and a cooling tower located on the roof. In this lesson. Then. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise. on level 3 of the building model. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you place mechanical equipment.rvt. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component.Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component.HVAC Plan . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown.2-6 Tons . NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view. in corridor 328. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.High Efficiency . verify that Wall faces is selected. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 7 On the Options Bar.Horizontal . and select WSHP . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 .Left Return .

and in the Type Selector. 10 Select the WSHP. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first.8 Click the corridor wall face.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. click the top edge of the WSHP. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. as shown. click the dimension. verify that the WSHP is still selected. and click to place the dimension. and enter 2'. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. as shown.

Click OK. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. and click to place it in the mechanical room. for Water Flow. enter 9'.14 Click Modify. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. select the 2 WSHPs. for Offset. as shown. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Under Mechanical. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . enter 12 GPM. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection.

Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components.21 Click Modify. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. you create the return and supply piping systems. Create the logical connection between the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. including flow and pressure. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.

rvt. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Unlike logical connections (systems).HVAC Plan . Creating a Piping System | 115 . You can create pipes to connect system components. analyses cannot be performed. and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen.Mech 330).Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 .Design is highlighted. right-click the Systems column heading. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . and click View ➤ Piping. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 In the System Browser. click Training Files. but without a corresponding system.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. where it is easier to review the information. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i. indicating that it’s the active view.

select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 12 In the drawing area. select the 2 WSHPs. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This display indicates that the system is selected. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. As you assign equipment to systems. 10 On the Options Bar. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. Therefore. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Notice that on the Options Bar. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. Assigning a system component to an existing system. and the Edit System tool is not active.In the System Browser. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. select the boiler. 11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. for System Name. while pressing Ctrl.

for System Name.Design.Design ➤ Floor Plans. under Design ➤ HVAC . 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building.13 Click Finish Editing System. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. You have created the hydronic return system. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously. double-click Roof . 20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. Creating a Piping System | 117 . 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 17 On the Options Bar. 19 In the Project Browser.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. and select the cooling tower.HVAC Plan . Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply.

23 Close the roof plan view. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser.22 In the Select Connector dialog. and click OK. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click Expand All. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system. 25 Select the boiler. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. In heating mode. 28 Using the same method. and bypasses the cooling tower. and click Select. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. expand the Hydronic Return system category. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . indicating the logical connection. In cooling mode. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 29 Right-click CHWS. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements.

enter 18 GPM. 32 In the System Browser. and click Column Settings. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser. you can view several parameters.In the System Browser. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Properties. and click OK. for Water Flow. under Mechanical. expand Piping. You also manually modify the layout path as required. including the flow rate and size of the component. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. and click OK. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser.

6 Press Esc to clear the selection. then the Select a System dialog displays. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . click Training Files. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.rvt. you can place the cursor over a system component. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . select Mechanical Equipment.Design is highlighted. click Check None.HVAC Plan . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the system. select CHWR. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. 5 In the Filter dialog. 9 In the Select a System dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. the boiler. TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). 10 Click OK. Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.Mech 330).Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. When you draw a box to select components. indicating that it’s the active view.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . A system preview displays in red.

The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. duct. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. select Perimeter. or architectural components. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. enter 1' 6''. 13 Click Cancel. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. structural beams. It does not reference the architecture. verify that Solutions is selected. For Inset. click Settings. IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles.11 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 .

Verify the flow In a previous exercise. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. 17 Optionally.16 Click Finish Layout. and the flow for the other is 12. 19 In the drawing area. and press Tab 3 times. to display the path with thinner lines. With each Tab. the flow for one WSHP is 18. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

21 In the Instance Properties dialog. and access its instance properties. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 23 Under Mechanical.The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . 22 Select the boiler. verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. 24 Press Esc. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM). notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. under Mechanical. and click OK.

124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . which propagates flow throughout the system. Logically. and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. On the Options Bar.Design. the Number of Elements is now 8. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 27 On the System Tools panel.HVAC Plan . click Edit System. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. double-click Level 1 . you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR).Design ➤ Floor Plans. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. you physically close the CHWR loop. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 32 Click Finish Editing System. 28 In the Project Browser. 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. Next.

The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. under Mechanical. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. select a WSHP. 35 Using the drag control. note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. access its instance properties. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. 38 Using the same method. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and then close the Instance Properties dialog. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Cancel. as shown.

■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. select CHWS. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. For Inset. For Slope. select Perimeter 1 of 5. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. enter 1' 6''. Click Settings. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset.40 In the Select a System dialog. 41 Click OK. and then click OK. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . enter 0''/12''.

47 In the drawing area. as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. as shown. select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. 46 Click Modify. In a later exercise. (Both sections are at the same elevation. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 .

128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 51 Click Finish Layout. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. Either relocate the system components. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. To create the piping system. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.50 Using the same method. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. or manually modify the pipe. you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. or offset elevations are incorrect. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Add piping to close the supply loop. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). select a different layout solution.

double-click 3D HVAC Building. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ 3D Views. and the return pipes are magenta. as shown. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D. 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler.HVAC Plan . indicating that it’s the active view. As you work in the training file.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select the section of piping.Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. as shown. 6 Press Delete. 7 In the plan view. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 .8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Click to move the piping. select the boiler. 9 In the 3D view. ■ Move the cursor up 4''. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Click to specify the reference point.

click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. select the return pipe riser. The connections are automatically created. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. and click OK. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. and the lower one is secondary. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected. select the boiler. and click Draw Pipe. 13 In the plan view. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. 12 In the 3D view. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). 11 In the Select Connector dialog.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system.

16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. ■ Move the cursor down. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right.7''. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. enter 1' . the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and you select 1 connector. for Offset. and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . enter 2'.In a plan view. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and press Enter.

as shown. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. and the appropriate fittings are created. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. As you place piping runs that are close together. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. select the primary base mounted pump. and select it. select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump. 18 Press Esc twice. and click OK. 19 In the plan view.

28 Press Esc. 29 If necessary. and click to draw the pipe. zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections. and click Draw Pipe. click to connect to the pump. Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. 27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 .24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. right-click the bottom connector. and when the connector point displays. and click the minus symbol. you select the tee fitting. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump.

31 On the Options Bar. select the primary base mounted pump. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. 33 Press Esc. and click Draw Pipe. for Offset.Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. and click to create the pipe. enter 4'. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the discharge connector.

as shown. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. these pipe connections were created automatically. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. 35 Using the method learned previously.

enter 9' 6''. ■ Move the cursor down.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . type 1'. and click Draw Pipe. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown. right-click the bottom control on the tee. and click to create the pipe. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. for Offset. and press Enter. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

and click Element Properties. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. right-click. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view. you validate the flow through the system. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 . You now have a closed loop system.37 Click Modify. Next.

46 Press Esc. view the properties for the secondary pump. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. 44 In the 3D view. under Mechanical. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors. 48 In the plan view. right-click. The flow is being propagated through the piping. notice that Flow is 125 GPM. Connect the cooling tower Next.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Cooling Water Flow. 43 Press Esc. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). 42 Click OK. as shown. and click OK. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also.50 or 50% of the Flow. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). select the cooling tower. notice that under Mechanical. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. When you create the pumps in parallel. and click Element Properties. In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 Using the same method. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. under Mechanical. 40 Click Cancel. the value is 0 GPM.

49 Press Esc. NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 .

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Valves In this exercise. the water bypasses the cooling tower. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). and is heated by the boiler.rvt. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. and close the dialog. click Training Files. When the valve is open. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.50 In the 3D View. 52 Close the file with or without saving it. 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM.

and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. The bypass valve is closed by default.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Valves | 143 . 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Ball Valve . 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. 4 On the Options Bar. as shown.HVAC Plan . verify that the Diameter value is 3''.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 8 Press Esc twice. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory.10 Press Esc.2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower. 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method. parallel to the previously placed valve.2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . place another Ball Valve . 12 Select Ball Valve .

validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve. validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. verify that Flow is 0 GPM. and click Element Properties. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. Adding Valves | 145 . validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. 19 Using the same method. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. and select Ball Valve . 18 In the Instance Properties dialog. 20 Select the bypass valve.Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. In heating mode. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. right-click. and click OK.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. and select Ball Valve . under Mechanical. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower).2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. Sizing Pipe In this exercise.22 Using the method you just learned. validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. as shown.Design is highlighted. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system. click Training Files.HVAC Plan . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. indicating that it’s the active view. Initially. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM.rvt. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

click Pipe Color Fill .Size. and click OK. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. and click OK.Flow. for Schemes. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Pipe Color Fill .4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. Sizing Pipe | 147 . This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.

Select And. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method. select Friction. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .25 FT/100ft. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Under Constraints. Click OK. 13 Press Esc. and for Velocity. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. and enter 2. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. and click to select the branch. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. for Branch Sizing. select Larger of Connector and Calculated. enter 5 FPS. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. Inspecting the System | 149 . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. or offset elevations are incorrect. click Training Files. pressure. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing. Inspecting the System In this exercise. or manually modify the pipe. select a different layout solution.rvt. Either relocate the system components. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. Using the System Inspector. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe.

An inspection flag reports the section number. as required. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. This information helps you modify the system design. flow. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection).3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe. and pressure information including pressure loss.

Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level. 10 Click Finish. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. 9 Using the same method. for Fluid Temperature.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. targeting those systems that need attention. the Static Pressure is 7.88 psi. and the Pressure Loss is 1. and click OK. In this exercise. inspect Section 6 again. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project.67 psi. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. select 90° F. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.89 psi. you need to validate them. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. and to size pipe. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . as shown.

Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. After you assign components to a system. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). thus assigning the components to a system. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them.rvt. For example. These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). In the System Browser. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 9 Right-click CHWS. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH.HVAC Plan . You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. and for pipe sizing. click Training Files. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. right-click the Systems titlebar. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. Warnings display. 4 In the System Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems. the pipe is associated with that system. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. and click View.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Show to view all of the system components. and double-click Level 3 . A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. 7 In the System Browser. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection.HVAC Plan . but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. If you place components without assigning them to a system. As you learned when placing components. Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. double-click Level 1 . After you have assigned all components to systems.Design.Design. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .

otherwise. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems.Design floor plan. 13 Right-click CHWR. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views.HVAC Plan . 12 In the System Browser. click Close. expand the Unassigned folder. right-click Hydronic Return. Checking Piping Systems | 153 . 10 Using the same methods. 14 Using the methods that you learned. and select Level 3 . confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and confirm unassigned system components. and click Expand All.TIP If you have multiple views open. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components.

154 .

you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. 155 .

156 .

Define required lighting. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 .Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system.

For Temperature. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System .rvt. wiring. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. ■ ■ For Factor. select 90. click Training Files. You also add a wiring type. select Wiring Types. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. ■ ■ For Material. In this exercise you review electrical settings. select Copper. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. enter 1. ■ Click New Correction Factor. select 75.04. distribution systems. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. For Material. select Copper.Wire Sizes.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. and demand factors that are applied in the design. enter THHN. Select Correction Factor. speeding up the design phase. click (Open). expand Wiring . As you place components and create circuits. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. For Temperature Rating.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

■ ■ In the Color dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. select Red. Click Background Color. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. Click OK three times. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . for Custom Colors.■ ■ For Value.

Use the System Browser to check your design. Create power loads. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. Then.Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. as you place lighting fixtures. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. Create a panel schedule. 167 . you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. power circuits. First.

for Basic Colors. select Average Estimated Illumination.Lighting Color Fill view is open. By using orange as the color for this range. 2 In the drawing area. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 . 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK.00 fc. In the Color dialog. for the Spaces Category. 168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select the color legend.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks.00 fc. click Training Files. click (Open). select the color for Less Than 20. Under Scheme Definition. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Orange. Click OK. You can create additional color schemes.rvt. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend.

zoom to space Library 219.5 fc range. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) .Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 .277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. 13 Click the Level 2 . 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.277. The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . 10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active. 8 In the Project Browser. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order. which is the lowest value in the specified range.5 fc range is satisfied.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc.7 In the Project Browser. all three of these colored fields will clear to white. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. The red field will clear once the +/. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. indicating a value greater than 0 fc.Lighting Ceiling plan. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.

25 On the Options Bar. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select Multiple. 20 Select the lighting fixture. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click OK. 18 Click to place the fixture. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. the fixtures will move accordingly.The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. In the Space Lighting Analysis view.

28 In the drawing area. 30 On the Options Bar. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select Multiple.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 27 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. select the 3 fixtures.

172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. 33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

click Check None.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.277V. Click OK. 36 In the Filter dialog. select Lighting Fixtures. and for Category. 37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 .39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) .277V. click the ceiling grid line as shown. 42 In the drawing area. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. select Multiple Alignment. The lighting delta is satisfied. 41 On the Options Bar.

The fixture aligns. 44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture.

Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.rvt. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . click (Open). click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i.45 Press ESC to end the command. In the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you modify the light fixture IES files.

Lighting Color Fill plan. scroll to view space space Library 219. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Lighting Plan. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc. 178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 2 Tile the views as shown.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 .

click the value for Initial Intensity. Under Electrical. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. enter 162.00 VA. for Apparent Load.ies and click Open. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. Under Photometrics.93. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . for Ballast Loss Factor. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. ■ Under Photometrics. Under Identity Data. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. click the value for Initial Color. ■ In the Initial Color dialog.85. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. In the Select File dialog. for Type Mark. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. select Xenon and click OK. Under Photometrics. ■ Click Apply. select Luminous Flux. for Lamp. select T5 [HO]. Under Photometrics. Click OK. select 463T5_S. for Color Preset. enter F15. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. enter .■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. enter . specify 15000. ■ Click OK twice.00 lm. and click OK. In the Name dialog. click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse.277V and click OK. click the value for Light Loss Factor.

10 In the Filter dialog. Click OK. and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . click Check None. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown.277V. select Lighting Fixtures. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. and for Category. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.

Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . select the top center fixture. 15 In space Library 219. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.Press Delete. Note the lighting delta updates again.

Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown. Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Press Delete. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and receptacles to your design. 2 In the drawing area. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Open). Placing Switches. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. junction boxes. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0. Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 183 . Junction Boxes. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. you add switches. and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. Junction Boxes. In the next exercise.

277V. 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 7 Click to place the switch.3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared . 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown.

11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family.NoLoad. and Receptacles | 185 .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. 9 Press ESC to end the command. The element type Junction Boxes . Placing Switches.NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector. Junction Boxes. 12 In the Load Family dialog. Select Junction Boxes .rfa and click Open. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices.

186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . you can enter a space to separate the unit values. 15 Select the junction box.14 Press ESC to end the command. for Mark. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. 21 In the drawing area. zoom to space Library 219. NOTE When entering values. enter JB-1NL. 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Click Edit Type. for Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . note the Number of Poles is 1. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view. enter 9’0”.Offset. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. In the Type Properties dialog. Under Electrical. Click OK twice. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.

Space Name. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Expand General. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Select Load. dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. 24 For any column. right-click and click Column Settings. Space Number.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Placing Switches. and Number of Elements. and Receptacles | 187 . 26 In the System Browser. Click OK. 23 In the System Browser. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. NOTE If necessary. Distribution System. Expand Electrical. and Voltage. Select Size. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Junction Boxes. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems.

27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown. 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 31 Close the System Browser. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right.

The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter. 40 On the Options Bar. Junction Boxes. select Copy and Multiple. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. and Receptacles | 189 . Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. 38 Select the receptacle. Placing Switches. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

and enter 12’ and press ENTER. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. move the cursor along the wall. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. 42 Move the cursor down.

and Receptacles | 191 . Junction Boxes. Placing Switches.43 Press ESC to end the command.

192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.48 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 .

In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. Adding wiring to a project is optional. click Training Files.equipment. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2).rvt. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. zoom to the space Electrical 220. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). click (Open). 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and work toward the higher voltage. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings.

12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. Click OK.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 8 Select the panelboard. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . for Distribution System. For Panel Name. enter PP-2B.Loads. 7 Press ESC to end the command. select 480/277 Wye. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face.Surface: 100A. enter 20. select 120/208 Wye. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Max. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 14 Select the panelboard. 15 On the Options Bar. for Distribution System. #1 Pole Breakers. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown.

21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space. which is the logical connection between the elements. enter LP-2B. zoom to space Instruction 221. for Max. click Check None. Click OK. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. enter 20. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and for Category. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. For Panel Name. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Loads. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. 23 In the Filter dialog. #1 Pole Breakers. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 20 In the drawing area. select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Click OK. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B. The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel.

31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 32 Press ESC. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way. 33 Select the switch on the right.28 Press ESC to end the command.

Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 . 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit. 35 Select the left three-way switch.34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit.

44 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 2. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. select Wires. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . Click OK. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. click Check None. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. Click OK.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. except without wire. click (Open). Next you create circuits without showing wire. 38 Press ESC to end the command. and for Category. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.Loads. 41 In the Filter dialog. for Hot Conductors. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4.

click Training Files. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 13 In the System Browser. and then expand circuit 1. and Voltage Drop are selected. and verify that Load. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. Rating. 6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. expand Power. Distribution System. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Expand Electrical.rvt. Click OK. Voltage. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . right-click on the Systems heading. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220.

28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. under Electrical. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 30 Close the System Browser. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. change the Voltage to 277V. 22 With the junction box still selected. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located.

Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. under Identity Data. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. click Edit Type. 47 In the drawing area. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. 35 Press ESC to end the command. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Type Mark. Click Yes. note the label parameters and click Cancel. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . enter FR4.Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 40 Click OK twice. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click below the first one to place it. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. Click OK. Click Tags. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. 39 In the Type Properties dialog.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 52 In the Save As dialog. for File Name. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label .48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. For Circuit Number. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. Next you create a switch system. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. and for Category. Click Save. Click OK. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. select Break. Click OK. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. click Check None. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag.rfa. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. Deselect Break and for Suffix. 56 In the Filter dialog. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. Click OK. enter a comma. select Lighting Fixture Tags. and click Apply.

zoom to space Computer Lab 222. 13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. click (Open). Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 2 In the drawing area.rvt. under Electrical Lighting. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. for Switch ID. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. enter a. click Training Files.

under Electrical . for switch ID. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. Click OK. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID.Lighting. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall.15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures. enter b. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

and for Category. and data systems. select the PP-2B panel.26 Close the file with or without saving it. lighting. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system. click Training Files. select Electrical Fixtures. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. Click OK. 4 In the Filter dialog. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). Creating Power Loads | 207 . 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Check None.rvt. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 2 In the drawing area. Next you create a circuit and size wire. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 7 In space Electrical 220. click (Open). and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. Circuits are used for power. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space.

select Wiring. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. under Electrical . and click Element Properties. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog.rfa. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 13 Select the wire again. select Long Wire Tick Mark. enter 2. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. 15 In the Load Family dialog. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. and in the drawing area. Click OK. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks.Loads. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and click Open. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. for Hot Conductors. and in the right pane.

select the PP-2B panel. and click to select the circuit. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222. 22 In space Electrical 220. 25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Creating Power Loads | 209 . as shown.

There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . in space Instruction 221. 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc.26 Press Delete. click the connector of the first receptacle. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. 29 In space Instruction 221. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. as shown. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. 28 In the drawing area. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc.

Next you balance the loads for your design. select panel LP-2B. 3 In the Electrical space. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221.rvt. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun. An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded. Finally. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. click Open. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . zoom to space Electrical 220. 2 In the drawing area.

■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. 1-#12. Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating.3712 VA. Under Electrical-Loads.3616 VA). click Rebalance Loads. The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . Phase B 3636 VA. 12 Select panel PP-2B. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 1-#12. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. 5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. and Phase C . 14 Close the warning dialog. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. enter 30A. 1-#10. Scroll down. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. and Phase C provides 2028 VA.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. for Rating. 1-#10. B. 6 Click OK. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. Notice that the loads on Phase A.

Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. enter 30A.rvt. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. click (Open).Loads. under Electrical . and click OK. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1.15 Select panel PP-2B. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Select PP-2B. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. for Rating. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. for Rating. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. click Training Files. and click OK. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Next you create a panel schedule. 24 Select the transformer TP-2B. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel.Loads. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. enter 25A. 17 Close the warning dialog. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. Click OK. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. under Electrical . A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating.

click (Open).NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel.Panel Schedules. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.rvt. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. Under Header Text. 7 Select the schedule. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. 6 In the Project Browser. Next you use the System Browser to check your design. click Edit. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Close the report. for Font. Under Header Text. 11 Click OK twice. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. under Other. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. Under Body Text. and open E601 . 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. enter 1/8. enter 3/32. expand Sheets (all). The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. drag PP-2B onto the sheet. for Appearance. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. select Berlin Sans FB. select Bold and Italic. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. 5 In the Project Browser. for Font Size. click Training Files. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Font Size.

View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. select space Lounge 212. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. each with a load of 180VA. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. Expand Unassigned. press TAB once. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. In the System Browser. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit. Checking Your Design | 215 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. In the System Browser. 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits.

Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. zoom to space Electrical 214.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 18 Select panel LP-2C. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 In the drawing area. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . select MDP-1. for Panel. under Warnings. 16 Close the details dialog. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1. 15 In the dialog. 20 On the Options Bar.

217 . you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system.Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial.

218 .

Design is open. 219 . and verify that Level 1 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Plumbing Plan . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. right-click PVC .rvt. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In this lesson. You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. 2 In the Project Browser. you create a PVC pipe type. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In this exercise. Adding a pipe size. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. type PVC .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click Duplicate. planning is critical to a successful design. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping. in addition to loading existing families.Vent. click Training Files.Sanitary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Name dialog. and click Properties. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. and click OK.

under Pipe Types. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. and click Main. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.DWV: Standard. 21 In the right pane. Tap. for Pipe Connector Tolerance.DWV: Standard.rfa.0''. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. for Nominal.Sch 40 . select Sanitary. refer to Revit MEP Online Help. Tee. 10 On the Selection panel. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent.DWV. For Offset. 24 For Inside Diameter. 15 For System Type.Sch 40 . and click OK. select Tee Vent .PVC . select Sanitary. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. 26 Click OK. enter -4' . Cross. 13 In the right panel. 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 22 Click New Size. enter 5/8''.5 In the Type Properties dialog. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 27 For the new pipe size. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 6 Click OK. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. for Material. click Modify. 18 For System Type. click Training Files. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. PVC . 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. enter 1/2''. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . select Plastic. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. under Mechanical.Vent is listed. 25 For Outside.PVC . enter 27/32''. click Pipe Settings. enter 10°. select Tee. 17 In the left pane. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . In the Project Browser. select None. select Branch. select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .PVC .

and hot and cold water piping.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. 221 . including plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. Create the sanitary plumbing system. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. add a hot water heater. sanitary piping. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. Create the hot water system. vent. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. Create the cold water system.

Plumbing Plan . In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 1 urinal. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. as shown. 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan. you add 2 toilets. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. and verify that Level 1 .rvt. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise.Design ➤ Floor Plans. NOTE To identify a space name and number. including the men’s room (space Male 107). and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise.Design is open.

against the left wall. in the Type Selector. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.Wall Mounted. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.1. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. 5 On the Placement panel. select Public .6 gpf. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . as shown. 1 wall-mounted urinal. 4 On the Element panel.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. under Water Closet . and 3 sinks. centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Flush Valve .

above the first in the standard toilet space. (Again. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. select 3/4'' Flush Valve. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Esc.7 Click to place another toilet.) 8 Press Esc. under Urinal . use the reference line to center the fixture. zoom in closer.Wall Hung. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.

In placing the fixture.2'' Drain. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. click Place on Face. select 5''x5'' Strainer . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). 14 Click Modify.Rectangular. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 12 On the Placement panel. under Floor Drain .Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.

17 If all disciplines are displayed.rvt.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and review the components listed under this system. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). and a floor drain. 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . In this exercise. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. click Training Files. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. a urinal. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and click View ➤ Piping. and Default Domestic Cold Water. 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. 21 Close the file with or without saving it.

draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 2 In the Project Browser.Design is open. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. clear Lines (<Overhead>).Design ➤ Floor Plans. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. Only plumbing fixtures are selected. 6 In the plan view.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and click OK. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 8 In the Filter dialog. and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan . 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .

12 On the Edit System panel. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. 13 In the Systems Browser.9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. You include the bathroom space number in the name. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. click Finish Editing System. If you deselected the drain. enter Sanitary 107. expand Sanitary. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. 11 On the Options Bar. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. 228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for System Name. so the Create Sanitary System is available.

A preview of the piping layout displays. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click OK. 16 In the Select a System dialog. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. for example. as shown. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . The base is placed. a toilet. select one of the components in the system. select Sanitary 107. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. at the midpoint of the detail lines.

and click OK. for Offset. You accept this suggested solution. enter -1' 0''. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. The default settings are automatically modified. and for Offset. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 Click Modify.19 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. enter 1/8'' / 12''. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. 21 On Options Bar. 23 For Offset. 24 In the left pane. enter -4'-0”. and modify it to meet project requirements. and click Settings. click Solutions. enter -1' 0''. for Slope. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Solution Type. select Branch. select 4''. select Main. select Intersections. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements. for Diameter.

Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow). and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. select the vertical route path segments. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 .

30 In the 3D view. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets. as shown. 31 Click Modify. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . 34 On the Generate Layout panel. click Finish Layout. adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet.33 Using the previous method.

When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. ■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. select the fitting and click to reorient it.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

adding sinks in the men’s room. you continue with the work from the last exercise. 38 Close the file with or without saving it. and check the slope control. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 .37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting. as shown. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise.

verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. in the Type Selector. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i. and verify that Level 1 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . under Lavatory . 4 On the Element panel.rvt. 5 On the Placement panel.Design is open.Rectangular.Public. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .Plumbing Plan . as shown. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. select 22''x22'' . click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107).

you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches. select Multiple. and press Enter to create a second sink. 8 Select the sink. On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. TIP When entering dimensions. enter 2' 4''. For example.7 Click Modify. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . without having to enter ' and '' symbols.

Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 16 On the Edit System panel. click Add To System. 15 Click the 3 sinks. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107. and press Enter to create the third sink. Press Esc. 12 In the drawing area. click Finish Editing System. 11 In the System Browser. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel.

19 In the 3D view.In the System Browser. use the ViewCube to orient the view. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. and click Draw Pipe. with the tee fitting selected. double-click 3D Plumbing. under Design ➤ Plumbing . Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . as shown. 21 Select the tee. 22 In the plan view.Design ➤ 3D Views. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 20 Select the fitting.

enter 1/8'' / 12''. for Offset. 27 Click Modify. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. When you press the Spacebar. and click to draw the pipe. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . press Spacebar. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green.23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. and click Apply. 24 On the Options Bar. for Slope. enter 2' .6''. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. 26 On the Options Bar. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. In this example.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . 32 Select the double wye fitting. select Standard. and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. 30 In the 3D view. 29 In the Type Selector.DWV.PVC . 31 Click Modify. move the cursor over the stub pipe. under Wye 45 Deg Double .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 . and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting.

36 In the section view. right-click the right connector. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 34 Press Esc. enter 6''. and press Enter. for Offset. on the Options Bar. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option.33 With the fitting selected. and press Enter. 39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. In the next steps. 37 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 1'. zoom in to the double wye fitting. you add pipe segments to the double wye.

40 Click Modify. as shown. 41 Using the same method. draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°). which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. and click to place the pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . 42 Click Modify. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink.Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting.

and press Esc. 47 Move the cursor down. right-click the bottom connector. 46 In the section view. and click Draw Pipe. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. enter 6''. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 49 Using the same method. 48 Click Modify. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. press Spacebar.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping.

52 In the plan view.Sch 40 .DWV. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. select the P-Trap on the left.PVC . 54 Click Modify. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 . 55 In the 3D view. 53 Using the same method. under Trap P . select Standard. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 51 In the Type Selector. 56 Using the same method. You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.

The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 58 Using the same method. Move the cursor to the left. connect the right sink to the double wye. and click Draw Pipe.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. and press Enter. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. Click in the plan view. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view. In the plan view. select the left P-Trap. Select the double wye pipe on the left.. Click Modify. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 6''.

Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . select the section of pipe you just drew. while pressing Ctrl. click Finish to select the recommended solution. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. On the Routing Solutions panel. and select a proposed solution. while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. In the Type Selector.■ In the 3D view. as shown. under Pipe Types. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select PVC Sanitary. Press Esc.

62 On the Options Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. click Training Files. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. and verify the slope. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. for Slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. adjusting the sanitary stack. You have appropriately sloped the pipe.rvt. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . click Finish. 65 Close the file with or without saving it.

Sch 40 . under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . 9 In the Type Selector.DWV.Plumbing Plan . 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and click the intersection to place the fitting.Floor level line. 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and click Draw Pipe. click Modify. 7 On the Selection panel.Overall.Design.PVC . Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . 5 Select the tee. select the vertical stack. as shown. and click to draw the pipe. select the elbow fitting on the right. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. right-click the top connector. 3 In the Section view.Design. 10 In the 3D view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . select Standard.

17 In the Type Selector.DWV. enter 1'-0”. for Offset. under Plug . 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click the rotate control to change the orientation.PVC . as shown. 14 On the Options Bar.Sch 40 . 18 In the plan view. click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. 13 Click the rotate control once. select Standard. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.11 Click Modify. 12 Select the fitting. 15 Press Esc.

Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise.rvt. and verify that Level 1 . you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system.19 Click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . click Training Files. Creating the Cold Water System | 251 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 20 Close the file with or without saving it.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.

3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. urinal. select Domestic Cold Water. and for System Type. 9 In the left pane. verify that the value is 9' 0''. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. minimize the Sanitary system. For Offset.Overall. (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. 4 In the right pane. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 6 In the left pane.) 10 Click OK. select Domestic Hot Water. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. 14 In the System Browser. draw a selection box to select the toilets. under Design ➤ Plumbing . you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. click Check None. select Pipe Types: Water. (Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. select Pipe Types: Water. for System Type. select Main. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 7 In the left pane. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. and sinks. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. and click Main. select Domestic Hot Water. and click OK. For Offset. enter 9' 3''. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 15 In the plan view. if necessary. select Branch.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .Design ➤ 3D Views. select Plumbing Fixtures. 17 In the Filter dialog. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. expand Unassigned. select Branch. double-click 3D Plumbing . for System Type.

click Edit System. 21 On the Edit System panel. click Finish Editing System. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. For Flow Conversion Method.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. enter DCW 107. In the System Browser. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. Notice that the water main displays in blue. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. 19 On the System Tools panel. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack.

enter 7''. for Offset. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. 28 In the Type Selector. 30 In the plan view. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. for Offset. and press Enter. 33 Click Modify. 29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. at the intersection of the water main pipe. 31 On the Options Bar. click to the left of the urinal. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. connect the second toilet. and press Enter. enter 4'0”. and click Draw Pipe. and click the connector. 35 In the Type Selector. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.2 7/8''. For Offset. 36 Move the cursor to the left. 34 In the plan view. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. right-click the top DCW connector. under Pipe Types. and click to place the pipe. enter 10'. select the sink above the urinal.25 Using the same method. as shown. select Water. enter 0”/12”. 32 Move the cursor to the right. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. enter 3' . For Slope. select 3/4''. 37 On the Options Bar.

40 Click Modify. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. and click OK. 41 Select the top sink. and click to connect to the main cold water line. and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.39 Move the cursor to the left. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . 42 In the Select Connector dialog. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]).

44 Using the same method. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. add a water heater. connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . you create the hot water system. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.

open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Design is open. click Training Files. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. expand the Unassigned folder. and verify that Level 1 . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . Creating the Hot Water System | 257 . 5 In the System Browser. while pressing Ctrl. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 6 In the plan view. select the 3 sinks.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Plumbing Plan . 2 In the Project Browser.

8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties. Default Domestic Cold Water. select 0. verify that DCW 107 is selected. under Water Heater . You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first.6 Gallon. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. In later steps.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. When designing systems. and click Edit System. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. 14 Click Modify. as shown. you edit the system to add equipment. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. 15 In the System Browser. a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. 12 In the Type Selector. in the Unassigned folder. Default Domestic Hot Water. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. for System Name. 10 In the System Browser.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. and click OK. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 13 In the plan view.Tankless. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed.

specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. 23 On the Options Bar. right-click the middle left connector. enter 10’. enter 1' 6''. and click the water main line. click Finish Editing System. select the water heater. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 26 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. and on the Edit System panel. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. and select Draw Pipe. for Offset.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. and press Enter. 27 Click Modify. 19 Select the water heater. 24 Move the cursor up. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. 22 In the Type Selector. Slope: 0''/12''. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. 25 On the Options Bar. Offset: 4' 6''. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.

select Domestic Hot Water 107. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. and for Offset. select 4'-6''. 35 On the Options Bar. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. 38 Move the cursor to the right. click Finish Editing System. click Automatically Connect to switch it off. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. enter 1' 6''. 37 On the Options Bar. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. and on the Placement Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe. 33 On the Edit System panel. as shown. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . enter 9' 0''. for Diameter. 30 On the System Tools panel. for Offset. and in the System Selector. enter 1''. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and press Enter. 36 Move the cursor down. select a sink. click Edit System.

enter 1’. for Offset. 41 Move the cursor down. and press Enter. as shown. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 .39 Move the cursor down. 42 Click Modify. enter 2' 8''. and click just above the bottom sink. 40 On the Options Bar.

The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .43 In the 3D view. 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool.

rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .46 Close the file with or without saving it. 47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i.

264 .

265 .Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system.

266 .

To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate. If the tutorial training files are not present. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. In this tutorial. In this lesson. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. 2 Right-click Standard. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. After finishing each exercise. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system. 267 . go to http://www. However. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. you can choose to save your work. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. You create a new pipe type.autodesk.

verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. and then click OK. click Rename. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. verify that 9' 0" is specified. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. For Pipe Type. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. and click Properties. However. Next. under Mechanical. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. and enter Fire Protection Wet. In this exercise. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. For System Type. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. 6 In the Project Browser. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you modify the type properties of the pipe. Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. duct. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. structural beams. or architectural components. For Pipe Type. For Offset. For System Type. you create project parameters and work with schedules. select Fire Protection Wet. NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. select Fire Protection Wet. for Material. In the next exercise. In the left pane. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. 9 Click OK. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. verify that 9' 0" is selected. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. For Offset. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. select Carbon Steel. select Main.

You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the space crossing lines display. 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. select space Instruction 221 as shown. under Fire Protection. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. for Sprinkler Zone. select the upper half of the building. 8 Using a crossing window. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. For Group parameter under. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Under Categories. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.rvt. right-click. and click Element Properties. for Name. select Spaces. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . 5 Click OK twice. indicating that it’s the active view. enter Zone 1. select Fire Protection. When you highlight a space using the cursor. click Add. click Training Files.Design is highlighted. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and then click OK. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. enter Sprinkler Zone.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan . 6 In the drawing area.

enter Zone 2. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Fire Protection.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. and then access instance properties. to which you add various parameters.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then click OK. for Sprinkler Zone. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. for Sprinkler Zone. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. 13 Using the same method. under Fire Protection. click Training Files. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. select Zone 1. you create schedules for sprinkler design. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. including a calculated value parameter. 10 In the Filter dialog. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click OK.

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 6 Using the same method. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible. Select Schedule keys. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. For Units. select Spaces. select Length. 9 On the Formatting tab.Fire Protection Plan . ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. For Rounding. For Name. 10 In the Format dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. Click OK.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser. enter Protection Area Construction Type. enter Maximum Spacing. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and on the ribbon. In the Maximum Spacing column. and click Field Format. For Key name. For Type of Parameter. enter 15. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. For Group parameter under.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. enter Light. click Add Parameter.Design is highlighted. The schedule displays. 11 Click OK twice. select Feet and fractional inches. for Name. select Maximum Spacing. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. 7 Click OK. Click OK. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . double-click on each column separator. select Fire Protection. select To the nearest 1'. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . click the Formatting tab. 14 Select the new header.

under Available fields. enter 130. enter Sprinkler Schedule. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. and press Enter. Click OK.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary. NOTE The units of measure display automatically. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Ordinary. Unobstructed Extra. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. For Name. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab. select Spaces.

click Edit.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. For Type. For Units. and click View Properties. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). For Rounding. select Number. for Sort by. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . For Then by. click . 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Area. and click OK. select Common. Enter the formula operator / after Area. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. 22 Click OK twice. and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. For Formula. select 0 decimal place. select Fixed. The Sprinkler Schedule displays. 20 On the Formatting tab. 19 Click the Formatting tab. enter Minimum Sprinklers. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. for Sorting/Grouping. select Sprinkler Zone. under Other. Select Header and Blank line. select Level. select Minimum Sprinklers. In the Fields dialog. For Discipline. and click Field Format. Click OK.

For Fields. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. For Fields. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. For Then by (second instance). select Level equals Level 2. click Edit. and click View Properties. and then click Field Format. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. 27 In the drawing area.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. select Grand totals. select Minimum Sprinklers. ■ In the Format dialog. 26 Click OK 3 times. select Hidden field. select Level. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. At the bottom of the dialog. select Number. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . for Filter by. and then select Hidden field. and select Totals only. 30 Click OK twice. Under Field formatting. for Filter. verify that Use default settings is selected. right-click the schedule. select Sprinkler Zone.

select Count. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. For Category. and click View Properties.The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. select Grand totals. Under Field formatting. On the Formatting tab. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. delete the word Maximum. select Calculate totals. and select Totals only. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. double-click Type. select Embedded Schedule. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 . and Count. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Embedded Schedule. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. select Sprinklers. for Fields. click Edit. under Other. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. for Available fields. System Name.

48 In the floor plan. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. As a result. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type. 46 With the space still selected. and click OK. select Light. 50 Access the instance properties. double-click FP . select space 221 Instruction. Unobstructed. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 41 In the plan view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. select space 221 Instruction. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . select Ordinary. select Ordinary. 44 In the schedule. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. and access the instance properties. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog.Fire Protection Plan Design. for Protection Area Construction Type. and the spacing parameter values are evident. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM). Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. Unobstructed. 43 Click Cancel. under Identity Data. under Identity Data. for Protection Area Construction Type. 52 Click OK. IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. under Identity Data. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. Unobstructed. but their values are not determined. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. you are actually editing information in a database of building information.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

go to http://www. At the end of this tutorial. and double-click Level 2 . you can choose to save your work.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. As you place the sprinklers. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. As you create the system. If the tutorial training files are not present.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded.autodesk. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project. you will understand the process. By following the recommended workflow. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan.com/revitmep-documentation and download them.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . However. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. After finishing each exercise.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 279 . methodology.

6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 3 In the Project Browser. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. When there is a small misalignment. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. After placing the initial sprinkler. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. When this happens. 280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .

9 In space Instruction 202. You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face. because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers.Pendent . place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. 11 In the drawing area. while pressing Ctrl. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . as shown. and click to place 3 sprinklers. select the sprinklers that you placed. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. and select Sprinkler .Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. 10 Press Esc twice.

Next. Also. 13 On the Options Bar. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. you place non-hosted sprinklers. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. verify that Constrain is cleared. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. and then press Esc. as shown.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy.

specify a vertical offset. under Constraints. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . for Offset. 19 In the floor plan.FP_Ceiling view. you place non-hosted sprinklers. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. enter 11. 200B. click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. 29 Press Esc. and 200C). it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". and click Element Properties. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. enter 14' 6". enter 10' 6". Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. move the cursor to the right. This number is determined in the schedule.Fire Protection Plan . 25 Click OK. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. 20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. and press Enter. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met. 17 In the Project Browser. click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A.Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. open Design ➤ FP . Because the sprinkler is not hosted. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.Design. by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Notice that the schedule updates. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. you adjust the offset. Next. 18 Type WT. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. For Number.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .

30 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). and then creating the logical connection between these system components. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. indicating that it’s the active view. In the next exercise. click Training Files. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. After creating the logical connection. 1 In the Project Browser. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Unlike logical connections (systems). A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. and with piping (physical connection). This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i. This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP.Design is highlighted. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . However.Fire Protection Plan .

This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. named Fire Protection Wet. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. 5 Right-click the header. and select Piping. In the System Browser. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. within the Piping Systems folder. As you assign sprinklers to systems. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. click View ➤ Systems. Creating a Piping System | 285 . IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. as shown. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser.

click Settings.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. 14 Click Finish Editing System. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. indicating the logical connection. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. providing system editing tools. 15 In the drawing area. place the cursor over a sprinkler. select Branch. for System Name. For Offset. 13 In the System Browser. select an initial piping layout. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping.Wet is selected. and click Select. Next. The Edit Piping System panel displays. For Pipe Type. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. In the left pane. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. and number of elements in the system. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. verify that Main is selected. and on the Options Bar. press Tab. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. and select the system. enter FP Wet_Zone2. The Generate Layout tools are activated. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. and a piping layout preview displays. system equipment. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. 12 On the Options Bar. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection . verify that 9' 0" is specified. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 11 With the system still selected. 19 Click OK.

24 On the Generate Layout panel. select 2". the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell. 23 For Offset. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. click Place Base. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. click Solutions. for Diameter. The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. When the layout is finished. verify that Network is selected. and green represents branch lines). enter -12' 0".20 On the Generate Layout panel. The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). as shown. In general. 22 On the Options Bar. and select solution 5.

and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. On the Generate Layout panel. 29 Click Finish Layout. as shown. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. click Modify. A (parallel movement control) displays. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created.

and then you create piping to physically connect them. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. select a different layout solution. Next. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. and various manual pipe creation tools. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . Either relocate the system components. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. 32 If necessary. The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. the Connect Into tool. or manually modify the pipe. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . or that offset elevations are incorrect. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection.

4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee. indicating that it’s the active view. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design is highlighted. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 2 Zoom in. click Training Files. 3 If necessary. 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .rvt.Fire Protection Plan . click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i.

radiators. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . mechanical equipment. verify that Solutions is selected. click Finish Editing System. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. or a system component to display system tools. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. you can select the pipe or duct. for Solution Type. 14 Close the System Browser. 18 Click Finish Editing System. 8 In the corridor.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. 5 In the drawing area. and pipe or duct is created. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and select solution 5. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 12 On the Options Bar. verify that Network is selected. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. air terminals. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). and so on) are logically connected by a system. 13 Click Finish Layout. 9 On the Edit System panel. click Add To System. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab.

and then press Esc. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. select 9'. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. right-click. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 28 In the drawing area. for Offset.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. 29 Using the same method. and click Draw Pipe. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 21 In the Piping Plan. 25 Select the sprinkler. 27 On the Options Bar. 24 In the Piping Plan. and then tile the views.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler.Wet from the Type Selector drop-down.

Because the whole system highlights. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 . zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. 31 In the plan view.Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 33 Close the file with or without saving it.

Fire Protection Plan . for Scale. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Design is highlighted. 4 On the Options Bar. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. double-click on the section head to open the section view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Training Files.rvt. select 1/4" = 1'-0".Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ 6 Press Esc.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

for Diameter. 302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes. select 4".

and then tag the piping as shown. The pipe diameter is modified. and maximize the floor plan.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. as shown. select 1 1/4". 26 Using the same method. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . 25 On the Options Bar. for Diameter. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch. 24 In the drawing area. select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). 23 Close the 3D view.

and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. In this tutorial. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. In this exercise. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you created a wet fire protection system.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. You added tags to pipes. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. For additional practice. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria.

create details. and create schedules for construction documentation for a project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . add annotations and dimensions.

306 .

and click Properties. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and apply a view template. and click OK. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. matchlines. right-click Level 1. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. 307 . right-click Copy of Level 1. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .rvt. dependent views. If the view included detail graphics. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click Rename. and view references. under Floor Plans.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. click Training Files. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing. callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.

Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. and click OK. 6 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. and then press Esc. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 10 In the drawing area. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. and click OK. as shown. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. 4 Using the same method. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. views and put them on the sheet. 9 Click OK. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. and click Apply Default View Template. create dependent views for areas B and C. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. 2 Right-click the dependent view title. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. more focused. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. click Training Files. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Rename.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy.

In the Color dialog. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. click the current value. 21 Using the same method. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 13 Press Esc twice. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. 19 In the drawing area./ ---). For Line Pattern. for Target view. For Line Weight. Click OK. and click OK.12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. 20 Select the upper view reference and. select 11. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select black. select Double Dash 5/8". click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as . and then press Esc. Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 14 Click Finish Matchline. on the Options Bar. Creating Dependent Views | 309 .

indicating the detail and sheet number of each view. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. as shown. and zoom to each of the view references. 25 Using the same method. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. 28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 27 Using the same method.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline.

select Documentation. select Plumbing. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. select Plumbing Isometric. enter Plumbing Isometric . right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing. The section crop lines no longer display. Click OK. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. click Training Files. and select the section box. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. 4 In the Project Browser. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 .Domestic Water.Domestic Water. 2 Zoom in.29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. Under Graphics. and click Apply Default View Template. 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. For Default View Template. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. right-click Plumbing Isometric . for View Classification. right-click 3D Plumbing. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. and click to select it. For Sub-Discipline.rvt. for View Name. and click Properties. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise.

and then click OK. For Pattern. Click Apply. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select Dash. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16". press Tab 3 times. select 3. 12 Using the same method. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. and click to select it.9 Right-click. The selected piping displays as a dashed line.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view.13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements. 14 Right-click. as shown). Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 . and click to select it.

15 Press Esc. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements.Domestic Water view with detailing. Click in the drawing area to start a text label.Sanitary Waste. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. press Tab 3 times. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. On the View Control Bar. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. and click to select it. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. 18 Using methods learned previously. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. click Reveal Hidden Elements. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. In the drawing area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . Right-click.

Creating Callout Views | 315 .Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. you use a plan view to create a callout view. select To the nearest 1/8". click on the Format value. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. verify that Common is selected. as shown. 21 Click OK twice. and click to place the spot slope annotation. the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. for Rounding. 25 Press Esc twice. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. In the Format dialog. For Slope. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. and then place the callout view on a sheet. When the view is associated with a sheet.

for Scale. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. 5 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary.rvt. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). indicating that it’s the active view. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. click Training Files. select 1/4"=1'-0''.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. using the same method. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. drag it to the sheet.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. double-click M601 . select 5. under Sheets (all). and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. Click OK. 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. 13 In the Project Browser. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. for Line Weight. Creating Callout Views | 317 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

and select the viewport. enter WSHP PART PLAN. for View Name. Click OK. 17 In the Project Browser. For Title on Sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. right-click the callout view. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. For Default View Template.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine.

19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 .Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information. 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.

25 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and click Apply View Template. and click OK.21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. under Names. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. and click OK. and click Rename. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. enter Typical WSHP Detail. right-click the detail view. 26 In the Rename View dialog. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown.

■ work with model-based components. duct tags. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. 321 . and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. linetypes. symbols.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. and annotation to create a legend.

you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing.Creating Annotations In this exercise. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 8 With the text still selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. as shown. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. click Training Files. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles.

as shown. and then click Right Straight. a segment of round duct. Add leaders 10 Select the text box.9 Press Esc twice. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. verify that Leader is cleared. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 16 In the drawing area. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. 15 On the Options Bar. select a supply diffuser. and a segment of rectangular duct. Creating Annotations | 323 . a return diffuser.

verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. tag the remaining diffusers in the area. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. for Ducts. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. and click Open. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element. If necessary. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags. 22 In the Tags dialog. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. 20 In the Tags dialog.rfa. 17 Click Modify.rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. click Load. 24 On the Options Bar.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. under Category. and click OK. clear Leader. 21 In the Load Family dialog. move diffuser tags off the ductwork.

specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. and then press Esc. Creating Annotations | 325 . open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. Leader. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 31 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.25 In the drawing area. and Attached End. 32 In the drawing area. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A. select Horizontal. as shown. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP. 26 On the Options Bar.

as shown. click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . select Free End. for Leader. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. 34 In the drawing area.33 On the Options Bar.

and lock lighting fixtures. for Leader Arrowhead. Creating Dimensions | 327 . Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. That’s because you changed a type property. not simply an instance property. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 In the drawing area. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. lay out. select Dot Open 1/16". 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 40 Using the method learned previously. you use temporary dimensions to locate. and all elements of that type are affected. select the last tag placed. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well.36 Press Esc twice. and click OK.

4 Using the Move Witness Line control. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 12 Press Esc. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. On the Options Bar. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. and then select the interior face of the wall. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.rvt. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . indicating that it’s the active view. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. 5 Click to create a permanent dimension. select the dimension line.

19 Using the same methods. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints. and offset them 8' from the wall. click the 3 interior locks on the line. linework. Creating a Legend In this exercise. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. enter 8'. annotation symbols. Because the dimensions are locked. Creating a Legend | 329 . Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line.13 Using the same method. and notes. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components.3 1/2"). 18 Select the dimension value (7' . 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. 16 Press Esc. and press Enter.

place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 10 Using the same method.8 Neck. enter Diffuser Legend.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . ■ 9 In the drawing area.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . For View.rvt. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. click Training Files. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . 5 Click in the drawing area. For Scale. click below the title to place the diffuser. select Floor Plan. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. select 1/4" = 1' -0".■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Click OK. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend.

and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. 14 In the drawing area. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating a Legend | 331 .11 Press Esc. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. click next to the top diffuser.

open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 21 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE . 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 24 Select the component’s break line.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component. 22 Zoom in to the copied component. The selected detail lines are now thin. and then press Esc. 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . 332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .RISE symbol for the copy start point.DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 26 Press Esc.DROP and its text note. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol.

and then click Modify.30 Select Spot Elevation . and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down. 34 Using the method learned previously. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. Creating a Legend | 333 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet.MECHANICAL LEGEND. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. and then click Modify. 35 Change the text on the right to N. 33 Click to the left of the left break line. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . enter E. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.

41 Close the file with or without saving it. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.39 With the viewport still selected. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 40 Press Esc.

rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram.Detailing 15 In this lesson. 335 . detail groups. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. and text. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise.113 East elevation view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. A drafting view using detail components. click Training Files. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A detail callout that references another view. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser .

113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser.113 East on the sheet. place Power Riser . and click to place it. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then modify and align the views. select each of the 2 panelboards. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . 5 In the drawing area. Next.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. clear Leader. 8 Using the same method. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 4 On the Options Bar.

and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. and click Activate View. select the 113 North view. under Identity Data. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. 12 Select the Level 1 line.9 Press Esc. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. 13 Right-click. right-click. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Deactivate View. giving the appearance of a single view. for Title on Sheet. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.

Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. 17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 22 Press Esc. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. In the next exercise. 19 Select the Level 1 line. right-click. you add wiring to the diagram. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. select the 113 East elevation view. and click Activate View. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. right-click. 21 Using the drag control. as shown. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing .

and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down.113 North view. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 8 On the Options Bar. This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Line Weight. enter Electrical Power.rvt. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. As you draw.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . indicating that it’s the active view. and then click OK. 2 Close the Project Browser. Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. Under Modify Subcategories. In the Line Styles dialog. as shown. and click OK. click New.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. 9 Beginning at the transformer. In the New Subcategory dialog. select 6. expand Lines. click Training Files. notice that there are no snaps active. verify that Chain is selected. for Name. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel.

13 On the Options Bar. as shown. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. enter 1/8". 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).10 Press Esc. 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . for Offset.

TIP When you use the Trim tool. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 .15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. so that the result is as shown. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim.

Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once. 342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.

27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 29 Click Modify. as shown. 23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text. 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 28 Click above the cap. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center).

select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints.31 While pressing Ctrl. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. 344 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 On the Options Bar. select Multiple.

and then press Esc. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset.36 Press Esc. You enter exact values for each line length. 39 Move the cursor to the right.5. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 40 Press Esc. for Offset. enter 0 0. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. and press Enter. enter 3/32". 42 On the Options Bar. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .

45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. enter Ground. you can ensure that they stay together. 50 With the group selected. Using the same method. Press Esc. and press Enter. 46 In the Project Browser. for Name.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line.125. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. and click OK. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter 0 0. 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. while pressing Ctrl. expand Groups ➤ Detail. select all 3 lines. 47 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. click on the length dimension value.25.

and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. TP-2B. 52 Select the detail group. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 54 Select the group. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point.51 Using the method learned previously. draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer.

right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click OK. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Zoom in to view the section. 2 Right-click the copy. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Rename. and will place it on sheet E01. click Training Files.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. for Name. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. In later exercises. 59 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here.

and then click the corner where the Top. and Left sides converge. and then press Esc. Back. click Home.6 Select the section box. 7 On the ViewCube. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .

Under Names. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. Walkthroughs. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK. select 3D HVAC Iso. and click Apply View Template. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. right-click. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. select 3D Views. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear.

Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. 19 Complete the text labels. 16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. as shown. 15 Using the same method. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. Typical. (Right). label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . Move the cursor down and to the left. and click to specify the second leader point.

select Crop Region Visible. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. 23 Click on the crop region. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 25 Click OK. and under Extents. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser.To rotate and reposition a text label. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. under Extents. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . type VP to open the instance properties for the view. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. as shown. and then click OK. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS.

2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. For Scale. select 3" = 1'-0". Work with a filled region that represents a detail component. and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). click Training Files. select the isometric view. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. Click OK. right-click the view name.29 In the drawing area. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. Use detail lines to create a detail group. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Drafting Detail Components In this exercise.rvt. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Place a detail component.

4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down. For View Classification. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. as the rectangle start point. 9 Zoom in to the component. as shown. 14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". select Documentation. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). for Sub-Discipline. Click OK. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 13 In the drawing area. click the point at the top of the drain. select Plumbing. 12 On the Element panel. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down.

15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.P. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. Concrete. 22 Click Modify. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. 23 In the drawing area. and click OK. 18 With the filled region still selected. Drafting Detail Components | 355 . and then press Esc. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary.I. 20 Select 1. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck.5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. select C. (Line). for Type. select the filled region. 21 In the drawing area.

30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. select Multiple. and then click to select them. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .28 Click Modify. and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 31 On the Options Bar. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain.

draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then press Esc. as shown. (Rectangle). Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then select the side of the slab above the line. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . 41 Type ZF to zoom out.38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 40 Click Finish Region. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. 45 Using the method learned previously. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring.

51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. for Name. draw wide detail lines as shown.D. as shown. press Tab to highlight the chain. select the Flashing Membrane group. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide.. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Flashing Membrane_F. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 52 In the Create Group dialog. and click OK.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. and then click to select them. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. 49 Click Modify. 50 Highlight one of the wide lines.

60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down.55 Press Esc. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 61 Using the same method. as shown. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.

Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object.62 Press Esc twice. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 71 Click Modify. and then click OK. 64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region. 72 If necessary. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Leader and Free End.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. as shown. Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 67 On the Options Bar. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. select the keynote and drag the text to the right.

Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown. 78 Move the cursor to the left. and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 76 To select the leader start point. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and click to specify the second leader point. 81 Select the text note. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. 80 Press Esc twice. and click to specify the text insertion point. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 84 Using the following image as a guide. Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. as shown. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing .82 Continue annotating the detail.

open P103 . and click to place it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. and then press Esc twice. 90 Press Esc. 88 In the drawing area. 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. select the view title. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 91 Close the file with or without saving it.

for Line Weight. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. you import a CAD detail drawing. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. select Auto-Detect.dwg. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. Click OK. select Black and White. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. click Training Files. For Colors. select Visible. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. For Layers. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Click Open. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. For Import units. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial. For A-----NPP.Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. select 3.

and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down.Plumbing Part Plans & Details. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport. select the viewport title. 12 In the drawing area. and then press Esc. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. open P103 .8 Type ZF. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 11 Press Esc. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 . 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser.

366 .